Keyboard Part Number List

Go back to options

640 keyboards found/on record (showing page 3/3 - results 501 to 640)...

Page 1Page 2

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942032
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194380
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Italy; Typewriter ops
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942033
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194379
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 International; Typewriter ch to ch
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942035
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194379
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 International; Typewriter ops
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942036
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194381
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Norway; Typewriter ch to ch
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942038
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194381
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Norway; Typewriter ops
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942039
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194382
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Portugal; Typewriter ch to ch
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942041
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194382
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Portugal; Typewriter ops
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942042
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194383
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Spain; Typewriter ch to ch
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942044
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194383
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Spain; Typewriter ops
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942045
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194391
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Spanish Speaking; Typewriter ch to ch
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942047
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194391
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Spanish Speaking; Typewriter ops
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942048
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194385
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Sweden; Typewriter ch to ch
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942050
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194385
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Sweden; Typewriter ops
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942051
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194384
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 UK; Typewriter ch to ch
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942053
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194384
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 UK; Typewriter ops
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942054
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194390
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 76
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Japan/Katakana; Typewriter ch to ch
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942056
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194390
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 76
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Japan/Katakana; Typewriter ops
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942057
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194389
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 76
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Japan/English; Typewriter ch to ch
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942059
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194389
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 76
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Japan/English; Typewriter ops
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly with Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942211
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 8627490
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 US; Typewriter w/o SCCP
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly with Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1742720
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 1645100
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 US; Typewriter
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942001
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194328
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 US; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942004
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194374
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Belgium; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942007
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194387
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Brazil; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942010
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194388
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Canadian French; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942013
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194375
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Denmark; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942016
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194386
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 EBCDIC (WTC); OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942019
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194376
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Finland; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942022
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194377
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 French (QWERTY); OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942025
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194378
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 French (AZERTY); OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942028
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5914373
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Austria/Germany; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942031
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194380
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Italy; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942034
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194379
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 International; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942037
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194381
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Norway; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942040
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194382
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Portugal; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942043
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194383
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Spain; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942046
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194391
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Spanish Speaking; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942049
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194385
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Sweden; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942052
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194384
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 UK; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942055
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194390
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 76
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Japan/Katakana; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942058
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194389
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 76
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Japan/English; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942161
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194328
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 US; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942162
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194374
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Belgium; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942163
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194387
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Brazil; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942164
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194388
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Canadian French; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942165
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194375
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Denmark; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942166
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194386
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 EBCDIC (WTC); OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942167
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194376
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Finland; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942168
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194377
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 French (QWERTY); OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942169
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194378
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 French (AZERTY); OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942170
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194373
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Austria/Germany; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942171
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194380
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Italy; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942172
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194379
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 International; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942173
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194381
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Norway; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942174
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194382
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Portugal; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942175
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194383
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Spain; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942176
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194391
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Spanish Speaking; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942177
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194385
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Sweden; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942178
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194384
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 UK; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942179
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194389
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 76
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Japan/English; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942180
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194390
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 76
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Japan/Katakana; OCP typewriter w/o channel-to-channel and power on features
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Doc: IBM 3279 Color Display Station Models 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B Maintenance Information (#SY33-0069-3) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3278/3279 Display Console 75-key Operator Console Keyboard with Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 4942247
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 8627490
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3276/3278/3279 75-key Operator Console Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM Canada
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1979 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 US; Typewriter w/ SCCP
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5251/5252 Display Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 7361073
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 1752692
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5251/5252 Typewriter Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 US
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Additional NotesAdditional Notes
Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know.		 Seems to be the equivalent to P/N 7362149
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20221006200258/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/284910823045

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658943
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 US
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658944
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Spanish Speaking
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658945
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Canada (French)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658946
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Japan, English
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658947
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 US
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658948
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Spanish Speaking
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658949
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Canada (French)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658950
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Japan, English
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658951
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 US
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658952
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 US/Canada (ASCII)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658953
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Brazil
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658954
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Spanish Speaking
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658955
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Canada (French)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658956
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Canada (English)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658957
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Brazil
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658958
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 69
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Japan, Katakana
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658959
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 69
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Japan, Katakana
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658960
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 85
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Japan, English
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658961
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 85
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Japan, Katakana
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658962
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Brazil
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658963
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Belgium
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658964
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 France QWERTY
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658965
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 France AZERTY
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658966
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 International
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658967
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Italy
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658968
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Spain
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658969
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 UK
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658970
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Belgium
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658971
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 France QWERTY
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658972
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 France AZERTY
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658973
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 International
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658974
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Italy
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658975
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Spain
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658976
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 UK
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658977
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Germany
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658978
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Belgium
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658979
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Denmark
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658980
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Finland
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658981
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 France QWERTY
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658982
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 France AZERTY
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658983
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 International
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658984
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM Italy
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Italy
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 ASK: SNKB-B1981-58T-83
Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658985
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Portugal
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658986
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Spain
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658987
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 UK
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658988
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Norway
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Typewriter Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658989
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Typewriter Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.		 Beamfoot
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 83
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Sweden
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658990
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Austria/Germany
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658991
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Denmark
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658992
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Finland
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658993
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Portugal
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658994
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Norway
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658995
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Austria/Germany
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658996
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Denmark
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658997
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Finland
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658998
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Portugal
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard w/ Proof Arrangement

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2658999
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Norway
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Station Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2659000
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 5281/5282/5285/5286 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Sweden
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 5281 Data Station and IBM 5285 Programmable Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0633-1) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 6580 Displaywriter Type A Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2682678
Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code
The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU.		 001
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 6580 Displaywriter Type A Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM Canada
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ProtocolProtocol
The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets).		 IBM 6580-specific
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DA-15 cable

IBM 6580 Displaywriter Type A Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 2683230
Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code
The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU.		 001
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 6580 Displaywriter Type A Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM Italy
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1980 Q2
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ProtocolProtocol
The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets).		 IBM 6580-specific
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DA-15 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 82
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Web: https://kuritakey.zone/ibm-displaywriter-6580/
CreditsCredits
A reserved special acknowledgement to anyone who has helped me with research through social media, email or via the P/N submission form for this keyboard part number.		 charlotte @ kuritakey.zone

IBM 3727 Operator Console Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 5641316
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 4496922
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3727 Operator Console Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM U.S.
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 IBM silver rectangle badge
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Black straightened-style fixed DA-15 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 87
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 US English
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220812223423/https://www.ebay.com/itm/363942980375

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1742693
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 8627492
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0734
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 87-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 87
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Typewriter w/ number pad and tab key
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly with Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1742694
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 8627492
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0734
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 87-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 87
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Typewriter w/ number pad and tab key
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1742695
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 8627619
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0834
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 87-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 87
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Typewriter w/ gmac number pad
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly with Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1742696
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 8627619
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0834
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 87-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 87
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Typewriter w/ gmac number pad
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1742697
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 8627621
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0835
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Typewriter w/ gmac number pad
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly with Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1742698
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 8627621
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0835
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Typewriter w/ gmac number pad
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1742712
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194167
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0732
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Data Entry I adding machine
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1742713
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194166
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0731
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 87-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 87
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Typewriter w/ number pad
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly with Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1742714
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194167
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0732
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Data Entry I w/ adding machine feature
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Web: https://www.flickr.com/photos/triplehaata/albums/72157645613396820/

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1742715
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 8542846
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0802
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Data Entry I adding machine w/o o bar
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly with Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1742716
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 8542846
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0802
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 75-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 75
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Data Entry I adding machine w/o o bar
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly with Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1742717
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 5194166
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0731
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 87-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 87
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Typewriter w/ number pad
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1742722
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 8326332
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0808
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 87-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 87
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Typewriter w/ PF1-12
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly with Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1742723
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 8326332
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0808
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 87-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 87
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Typewriter w/ PF1-12
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278 Final Keyboard Assembly without Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1745708
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 2688848
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0932
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 87-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 87
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Typewriter w/ number pad and tab key
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3276/3278/3279 Display Station 87-key Typewriter Keyboard with with Num. Lock

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.		 1745709
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.		 2688848
RPQRPQ
Request Price Quotation
The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product.		 8K0932
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.		 Model B 3251/3276/3278/3279/8775 87-key Base Keyboard
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.		 IBM 3278 Model 2A Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
IBM 3279 Model 2C Color Display Console (IBM 3270 family)
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.		 IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.		 IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.		 1983 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.		 SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.		 Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.		 None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.		 None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.		 Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.		 87
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.		 Typewriter w/ number pad and tab key
Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features
Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc.		 Clicker assembly (internal solenoid)
Compartment for host computer's/terminal's guide
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.		 Doc: IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276/3278 Keyboard Assembly Parts Catalog (#S126-0029-0) [source: bitsavers]
Page 1Page 2